Pioneer DV-600AV-S Operating Instructions
DV -600A V -S DV -400V -S DVD Player Operating Instructions Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www .pioneer .co.uk (or http://www .pioneer .eu). DV600AV_UK_EN.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recover y and recycling. P rivate households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). F or countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessar y treatment, recover y and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. K058_A_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A DV600AV_UK_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product includes FontAvenueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En IMPORT ANT : THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by AST A or BSI to BS1362. Check for the AST A mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover , you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer . If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut of f and disposed of safely. There is a danger of sever e electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please obser ve the wiring code as shown below . If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORT ANT : The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BL UE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En DV600AV_UK_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Content s 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using a SCART AV cable . . . . . 12 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 12 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 04 Getting started Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 20 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 05 Playing discs Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 26 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Browsing DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching audio language/channels . . . . . 33 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 34 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . 38 Digital Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About the HDMI audio output settings . . . 47 HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 09 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs . . . . . 51 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . 52 Setting the TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 5 En English Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDMI 1 digital interface The HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) interconnect provides high quality digital audio and video, all from a single user- friendly connector. HDMI is the first consumer electronics interface to support uncompressed standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround sound audio 2 , all using one interface. You can easily connect to a HDMI- equipped AV receiver or audiovisual device for high quality audio and video, and communication between the video source and (DTV) players, set-top boxes, and other audiovisual devices is also supported. ⢠Super VCD compatible This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD stan- dard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. ⢠PureCinema Progressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan- compatible TV or monitor using the component video outputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠New Disc Navigator with moving pictures The new Disc Navigator enables you play the first few seconds of each title or chapter in a thumbnail image on screen. ⢠DSP effects for enhanced playback See Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus on page 36. ⢠Picture zoom See Zooming the screen on page 33. ⢠MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC compatibility See Compressed audio compatibility on page 8. ⢠JPEG compatibility See JPEG file compatibility on page 10. ⢠DivX î3 video compatibility See DivX video compatibility on page 10. ⢠WMV compatibility See CD-R/-RW compatibility on page 8 or About WMV on page 10. ⢠Energy saving design An auto power-off function switches the player into standby if not used for about 30 minutes. DV-600AV only: ⢠DVD-Audio and SACD compatible Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD). 1. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. 2. It is not possible to output SACD or DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection of this player of this player. (DV- 400V only) 3. DV-600AV: DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DV-400V: DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En ⢠24-bit/192 kHz compatible DAC The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC means that this player is fully compatible with high sampling-rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low-level resolution and high-frequency detail. ⢠Built-in Dolby 1 Digital and DTS 2 decoding with multichannel outputs This player features multichannel analog outputs for connection to an AV amplifier to give you stunning surround sound from Dolby Digital, DTS and multichannel DVD-Audio discs. DV-400V only: ⢠24-bit/96 kHz compatible DAC The integrated 24-bit/96 kHz DAC means that this player is compatible with high sampling- rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low- level resolution and high-frequency detail. ⢠Excellent audio performance surround sound entertainment with Dolby Digital 1 and DTS 3 software When connected to a suitable AV amplifier or receiver, this player gives great surround sound with Dolby Digital and DTS discs. WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Power cable ⢠Operating instructions ⢠Warranty card Putting the batteries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when youâÂÂre finished. Important Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery togetherâÂÂalthough they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. 1. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro LogicâÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. 3. âÂÂDTSâ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and âÂÂDTS 2.0 Digital Outâ is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En English ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this product for years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choosing a suitable location: Do... ⢠Use in a well-ventilated room. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where the player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or other room where the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playback compatibility This player is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. Please also note that recordable discs cannot be recorded using this player. *DVD-Audio and SACD can only be played back on the DV-600AV. ⢠This unit will play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJI FILM Corporation. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-V ideo DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD F ujicolor CD Super VCD DV600AV_UK_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content video, audio, etc. while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG or DivX video/WMV files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠Multi-session playback: No ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/DVD RW compatibility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs recorded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. However, some editing made during the recording may not be played back accurately. DVD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: DVD-Video, Video Recording (VR)* * Edit points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized playback: No ⢠MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playback on DVD-R/-RW: No Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encoding compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: No (DRM-protected audio files will not play in this playerâÂÂsee also DRM in the Glossary on page 59) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files â do not use for other file types) About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio compression technology. The file format and extension used depend on the application used to encode the AAC file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes î bearing the extension ' .m4a '. DRM- protected files will not play, and files encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display incorrectly. Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En English WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This player can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. This player can play DivX videos burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. Displaying external subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language settings on page 41) to match the subtitle file. This player supports the following language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. ⢠For external subtitle files the following subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not shown within the disc navigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 Turkish (tr) DV600AV_UK_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En DivX video compatibility DV-600AV: ⢠Official DivX î Ultra Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media files and the DivX î Media Format. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. DV-400V: ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. About WMV WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Mediaî Encoder. ⢠This player is compatible with WMV9 files that are encoded by using the Windows Mediaî Encoder 9 Series, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profile is not supported. ⢠DRM-protected video files will not play in this player. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File format used by digital still cameras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg (must be used for the player to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this player. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 11 En English Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup described here is a basic setup that allows you to play discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo audio is played through the speakers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video or S-video cables, as the picture from this player will not appear properly on your TV. (This player may also not be compatible with some combination TV/VCRs for the same reason; refer to the manufacturer for more information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jacks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cable, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plug to the video output. Make sure you match up the left and right audio outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. See below if you want to use a component or S-video (DV-600AV only) or SCART cable for the video connection. 2 Connect the supplied AC power cable to the AC IN inlet, then p lug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplugging the player from the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using either the front panel î STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of the -OFF- message to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reasons, do not plug this player into a switched power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receivers. P R P B Y C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver VIDEO OUT AC IN S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R COAXI AL To audio/video inputs To power outlet Y ellow White Red TV DV -600A V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 12 En Connecting using a SCART AV cable A SCART-type AV connector is provided for connection to a TV or AV receiver. The video output is switchable between ordinary composite, S-video (DV-600AV only) and RGB. See AV Connector Out on page 40 for how to set it. The SCART AV connector also outputs analog audio, so there is no need to also connect the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jacks. ⢠Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV CONNECTOR (RGB) output to a SCART AV input on your TV (or AV receiver). Connecting using the S-video output (DV-600AV only) If your TV (or other equipment) has an S-video (S1) input, you can use the S-video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-video input on your TV (or monitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with the same mark on the plug before plugging in. AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIA L TV To SCART A V input DV -600A V P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V TV To S-video input DV600AV_UK_EN.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 13 En English Connecting using the component video output You can use the component video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipment). This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor or AV receiver. Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the component video output. Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. To set up the player for use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 40. When the player is set to output progressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, switch everything off and reconnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 11), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls Switch the player to standby then, using the front panel controls, press î STANDBY/ON while pressing î to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interlace output. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaultâÂÂsee Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16.) P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT A UDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV -600A V î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Connecting to an AV receiver You can connect this player to your AV receiver using the multichannel analog outputs or one of the digital outputs. In addition to these connections, you should also connect the 2 channel analog outputs for compatibility with all discs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a standard (composite) connection). 1 Connect the analog AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R and VIDEO OUT jacks on this player to a set of analog audio and video inputs on your AV receiver. 2 Connect the AV receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. You can also use the SCART AV connector, the S-video (DV-600AV only) or component video jacks to connect to the AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable between your DVD player and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. Connecting the multichannel analog outputs (DV-600AV only) If your AV receiver has 5.1 channel analog inputs, we recommend connecting this player to it using the multichannel analog outputs. Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dolby Digital and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multichannel DVD-Audio and SACD discs. ⢠Connect the multi-channel audio outputs on this player to the multi-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRONT , one for the SURROUND and one for the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channels. You can also use the SCART AV connector, the S-video (DV-600AV only) or component video jacks to connect to the AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connecting up and switching on, you should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Channel . See also Audio Output Mode on page 45. P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT A UDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V AV receiver To audio/video inputs P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600AV AV receiver To multi-channel audio inputs DV600AV_UK_EN.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 15 En English Connecting the digital output This player has both optical and coaxial-type digital audio outputs for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is convenient. Depending on the capabilities of your AV receiver, you might have to set up this player to output only digital audio in a compatible format. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 and refer to the operating instructions that came with your AV receiver. Note that SACD audio is not output through these jacks, so this connection should be in addition to, rather than instead of, a 5.1 channel analog connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this player to a digital input on your AV receiver. DV-600AV only: For an optical connection, use an optical cable (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to an optical input on your AV receiver. For a coaxial connection, use a coaxial cable (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to a coaxial input on your AV receiver. Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercially available HDMI cable. The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the player is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see below for limitations), SACD, Video CD/Super VCD, CD, WMA, MP3, MPEG-4, AAC, Divx video and WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this player to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI- compatible monitor. The arrow on the cable connector body should be face up for correct alignment with the connector on the player. DV -600A V AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIA L AV receiver To coaxial/optical digital input P R P B Y C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV600AV_UK_EN.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En Note ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠When you change the component connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI settings to match the new component (see HDMI Out on page 39, HDMI Resolution on page 40 and HDMI Color on page 40 to do this). However, the settings for each component are then stored in memory (for up to 2 components). ⢠DV-600AV : The HDMI connection is compatible with 2 channel linear PCM signals (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/ 24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bitstream, multi channel DSD, and multi channel linear PCM signals, (5.1 channel signals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/ 24 bit). ⢠DV-400V : The HDMI connection is compatible with 44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2 channel linear PCM signals, as well as Doldy Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream. About HDMI HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection Switch the player to standby then, using the front panel controls, press î STANDBY/ON while pressing î to switch the player back to 576P/480P . î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En English Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON (page 19) 2 Disc tray 3 TOP MENU (page 23) 4 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 19) 5 MENU (page 23) 6 RETURN (page 23) 7 HOME MENU (page 19) 8 Display 9 î OPEN/CLOSE (page 21) 10 î (page 22) 11 î (page 22) 12 î (page 22) 13 î and î (page 22) 14 HDMI indicator Lights when this player is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HDCP compatible component. 15 DVD/USB (page 35) 16 USB port (Type A) (page 35) 17 RW Compatible (page 8) MENU TOP MENU î STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE USB DVD/USB HDMI HOME MENU RETURN î î î î î î ENTER USB DVD/USB HDMI MENU TOP MENU STANDBY/ ON OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU ENTER RETURN î î î î î îÂÂî 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV -600A V 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV -400V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Remote control 1 î STANDBY/ON (page 19) 2 AUDIO (page 33) 3 SUBTITLE (page 32) 4 Number buttons (page 22) 5 TOP MENU (page 23) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 19) 7 HOME MENU (page 19) 8 î and îÂÂ/î (page 22, 26) 9 î (page 22) 10 î (page 22) 11 î (page 22) 12 PLAY MODE (page 29) 13 SURROUND (page 36) 14 î OPEN/CLOSE (page 21) 15 ANGLE (page 34) 16 DVD/USB (page 35) 17 CLEAR (page 31) 18 MENU (page 23) 19 RETURN (page 19) 20 î and îÂÂ/î (page 22, 26) 21 î (page 22) 22 î (page 22) 23 DISPLAY (page 34) 24 ZOOM (page 33) Using the remote control Keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The remote has a range of about 7 m. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. 0 1 23 4 5 6 789 DVD/ CLEAR USB ANGLE A UDIO TOP MENU HOME MENU SUBTITLE PLAY MODE SURROUND ZOOM DISPLAY MENU RETURN ENTER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î î îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î î î î î î 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 3 9 11 22 24 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 19 En English Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is connected properly and that the player is plugged in, press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel or remote control to switch the player on. Also, switch on your TV and make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DVD player switches on but there is nothing displayed on my TV. Make sure that the TV is set to the correct video input (not a TV channel). For example, if you connected this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switch your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver and an auto power off function. If the player is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is closed but no disc is playing and no control is pressed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this player makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. Note ⢠From here on in this manual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display . îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons on the remote work in exactly the same way). RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes. GUIDE RETURN ENTER HOME MENU RETURN DV -600A V MENU TOP MENU OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN î î ENTER ENTER DV600AV_UK_EN.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂTV Screenâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16:9 (Wide)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Letter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Video Output settings on page 40 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on- screen displays. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ settings. 3 Select a language. The on-screen language will change according to your selection. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out AV Connector Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Vide o Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En English Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/ WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the next chapter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPEG slideshow on page 27. Important ⢠DVD Audio and SACD files can only be played back on the DV-600AV. ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD- R/-RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD, disc containing DivX video/WMV files or Video CD/Super VCD, also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). 4 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, an on-screen menu may appear. See DVD-Video and DivX disc menus on page 23 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 24 for more on how to navigate these. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a containing DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback starts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If a disc contains a mixture of movie (DivX video/WMV) and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the movie files ( DivX/WMV )or the other media file types ( MP3/WMA/MPEG- 4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. 0 1 23 4 56 789 STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER î î î îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î î î î î î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. The following chapter covers other playback features in more detail. Resume and Last Memory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/Super VCD or DivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown in the display indicating that you can resume playback again from that point. If the disc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows RESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press î (stop) while RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, if you take the disc out of the player after stopping playback, the last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the same one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you can resume playback. Note ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD discs. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press î OPEN/CLOSE to stop playback and open the disc tray. Button What it does î Starts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) î P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. î Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. î (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î (remote only) P ress to start fast for ward scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titles/chapters. î Skips to the next track, title or chapter . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (for DVD-Audio) or track (for CD/SACD/Video CD /Super VCD ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD- Video) or track (DVD-Audio*/ SACD/CD/Video CD/Super VCD). *within the current group DV600AV_UK_EN.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En English DVD-Video and DivX disc menus Some DivX media files and many DVD-Video and DVD-Audio discs feature menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give access to additional features, such as subtitle and audio language selection, or special features such as slideshows. See the disc packaging for details. Sometimes DivX and DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this group you first have to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. ⢠The DivX menu can only be displayed on DV-600AV. TO P MENU MENU RETURN ENTER 0 1 23 4 56 789 Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or DivX media ï¬Âles) menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously dis- played menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring brows- able pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than the î (play) button. FAQ ⢠After I load a DVD disc, it ejects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your player. The region number should be printed on the disc; check it against the region number of the player (which you can find on the rear panel). See also DVD- Video regions on page 53. If the region number is OK, it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean the disc and look for signs of damage. See also Taking care of your player and discs on page 51. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and undamaged. See Taking care of your player and discs on page 51 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded correctly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probably an incompatible format or disc type, such as DVD-Audio ( for DV-400V ) or DVD-ROM. See Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for more on disc compatibility. â¢I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some discs? Some movie formats are such that even when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessary at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. â¢I have a standard (4:3) TV and set the player to show widescreen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still get black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the player, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letter box format. This is not a malfunction. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered menu option. P ress ENTER to select. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). 0 1 23 4 56 789 RETURN î î î ENTER DV600AV_UK_EN.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En English ⢠IâÂÂve connected to a HDMI compatible component but I canâÂÂt get any signal and the front panel HDMI indicator wonâÂÂt light! Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HDMI compatibility. ⢠ThereâÂÂs no picture from the HDMI output! This player cannot display pictures from DVI compatible sources. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HDMI compatibility. Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. ⢠My AV receiver is definitely compatible with 96 kHz/88.2 kHz Linear PCM audio, but it doesnâÂÂt seem to work with this player. WhatâÂÂs wrong? (DV-600AV only) For digital copy-protection purposes, some 96 kHz/88.2 kHz DVD discs only output digital audio downsampled to 48 kHz/ 44.1 kHz. This is not a malfunction. To fully take advantage of the high sampling rate audio, connect the analog audio outputs to your amplifier/receiver. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear SACD audio through the digital outputs? (DV-600AV only) SACD digital audio is only available through the HDMI outputs when connected to an HDMI-compatible amp that can handle protected audio contents. Some DVD-Audio discs too only output audio through the analog outputs. ⢠Is it better to listen to DVD-Audio discs through the analog outputs? (DV-600AV only) Some DVD-Audio discs do not output anything through the digital outputs, and multichannel discs are downmixed to stereo for the digital output. In addition, high sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (higher than 96kHz) automatically downsample audio output from the digital outputs. Using the multichannel analog audio outputs for DVD-Audio have none of these limitations. ⢠My DVD-Audio disc starts playing, but then suddenly stops! (DV-600AV only) The disc may have been illegally copied. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 26 En Chapter 5 Playing discs Note ⢠Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD and SACD discs, Video CDs/Super VCDs, CDs, DivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠DVD-Audio and SACD discs can only be played back on DV-600AV. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed for DivX video/WMV). 1 During playback, press î or î to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVDs (including DVD-Audio), DivX video/WMV and Video CD/Super VCDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠When scanning a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode or a MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, forwards and backwards. Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV can be played at four different forward slow motion speeds. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press and hold îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î until slow motion playback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠There is no sound during slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 27 En English Viewing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/-RW containing JPEG picture files, press î (play) to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. ⢠If the folder contains MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC file repeats. During the audio playback, you can still use the skip ( îÂÂ/ î ), scan ( îÂÂ/î ) and pause ( î ) functions. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may notice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Browsing DVD or Video CD / Super VCD disc with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/- RW or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Disc Navigator with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loaded and whether the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumbnails from a Video CD /Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Title â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Play List: Time â Thumbnails from the Play List at 10 minute intervals. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. î Displays the next picture. îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and ï¬Âips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Disc Navigator Disc Navigator Title Chapter DV600AV_UK_EN.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 28 En The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press î / î (you donâÂÂt have to wait for all the thumbnails to finish playing to display the previous/next page). 3 Select the thumbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number buttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 32. Browsing WMA, MP3 , MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video , WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there are other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to navigate. Use the cursor up/down buttons ( îÂÂ/î ) to move up and down the folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( î ) to return to the parent folder. Use ENTER or cursor right ( î ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also return to the parent folder by going to the top of the list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play the highlighted track or DivX video/WMV file or display the highlighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC or DivX video/WMV file is selected, playback begins, starting with the selected file, and continues until the end of the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a slideshow begins, starting with that file, and continues to the end of the folder. 01 04 02 05 03 06 Disc Navigator: Title 01- 49: - - 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 File1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Folder 2 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps DV600AV_UK_EN.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 29 En English Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback. Simply select the audio file you want to listen to followed by the JPEG from which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slideshow and the audio files repeats. Playback controls are effective for the JPEG slideshow only. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navigator and start playback using the î (play) button. Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD, Video CD/Super VCD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD- RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/DivX video/WMV files. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 30). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repeat play with Video CD/ Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and random play at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRepeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a repeat play option. If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. The repeat options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video and DVD-RW discs, you can select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For SACDs,CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV600AV_UK_EN.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 30 En ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for some DivX media files, select Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). Using random play Use the random play function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), Groups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Audio, SACD, CD, Video CD/ Super VCD) at random. (Note that the same track/title/chapter may play more than once.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. Important ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the random play menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/WMV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You can't use random play together with program or repeat play. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a random play option. The random play options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video discs, you can select Random Title or Random Chapter (or Random Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Random Track , (or Random Off ). ⢠For CDs, SACDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during random play: Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters/groups/tracks on a disc. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/WMV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does î Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. î Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV600AV_UK_EN.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 31 En English 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chapter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a CD, SACD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠You can insert steps into the middle of a program list by just highlighting the position where you want the new step to appear and entering a title/chapter/group/ track number. ⢠To delete a step, highlight it and press CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit. ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). î Skip to the next step in the program list. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 32 En Searching a disc You can search DVD-Video discs by title or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CDs and Video CD/ Super VCDs by track number or time; DivX video /WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter number. Important ⢠Search functions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a search mode. The search options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title, chapter or track number, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video/WMV) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 41. ⢠See Displaying external subtitle files on page 9 for more on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV600AV_UK_EN.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 33 En English Switching audio language/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. When playing a VR format DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, sub, and mixed channels during playback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to switch channelsâÂÂsee the disc box for details. (When you change the audio channel, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video CD/Super VCD, you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. 1 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language/channel option. The language/channel information is shown on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 41. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video/WMV title or Video CD/Super VCD or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor (Normal, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/WMV title and JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 34 En Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Display settings on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be displayed on-screen while a disc is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeatedly. ⢠When a disc is playing, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
USB playback 06 35 En English Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB interface It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch JPEG files using the USB interface on the front of this unit. Connect a USB mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this unit. ⢠With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠The Home Menu cannot be displayed while using the USB mode. 1 With the player switched on, press DVD/USB. Make sure your TV is on and set to the correct video input, and that USB MODE is showing on the front panel display. 2 Connect your USB device. The USB terminal is located on the front panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠The method of playback for files saved on a USB device is the same as for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback controls on page 22 and Playing discs on page 26. 4 Turn off this player and remove the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on it will start up in USB mode. To return to DVD mode, either press DVD/USB or press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. Important If a USB ERR message lights in the display, it may mean that the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this player, or that the device is incompatible. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Reconnecting the USB device with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front panel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , then once again select USB mode ( USB MODE will appear in the front panel display). ⢠Using a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible. î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î USB mass storage device USB (T ype A) DV -600A V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 36 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Settings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select and change settings using the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . Audio DRC ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quieter sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while controlling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much change. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective through the digital output when Digital Out is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Audio Out settings on page 39). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and AV receiver settings. Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. Tip ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the remote control to switch Virtual Surround on. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠DV-600AV only: The Audio Output Mode (see page 45) must be set to 2 Channel in order to be able to use Virtual Surround. ⢠If the player is outputting Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtual Surround has no effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 for how to set up the digital output formats. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Aud i o DRC Dialog On Off DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 37 En English ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Equalizer (DV-400V only) ⢠Settings: Rock , Pop , Live , Dance , Techno , Classic , Soft , Off (default) The various preset EQ curves are designed to suit various styles of music. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if the Equalizer is switched on. Dialog ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (default) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Make settings using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . You can adjust the following picture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of the picture ( High , Medium , Low , Off (default) ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR (DV-600AV only) â Switches on/off block noise reduction ( On, Off (default)). Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Chroma Level settings using the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. V ideo Adjust Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 Off 0 0 Off î î î î î î î Video Adjust DV -600A V screen Brightness min max 0 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 38 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu provides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you want to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table below, the default setting is shown in bold : other settings are shown in italics . ⢠The Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of this player to an AV receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the operating instructions supplied with your other equipment to see which digital audio formats itâÂÂs compatible with. ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. ⢠The HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDMI- compatible component using the HDMI connector. ⢠The Digital Audio Out , Component Out , AV Connector Out, SACD Playback (DV-600AV only) and Speakers (DV-600AV only) settings cannot be set if the player is connected to an HDMI- compatible component using the HDMI connector. Additionally, certain settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV600AV_UK_EN.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 39 En English Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Note that there is no digital output when playing SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs regardless of this setting. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoded digital audio is output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD disc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/receiver is not compatible with DTS audio.) DTS > PCM No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. Linear PCM Out (DV-600AV only) Down Sample On 96kHz digital audio is converted to 48kHz for digital output. Note that High sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (192kHz or 176.4kHz) automatically output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs. Down Sample Off 96kHz digital audio is output as is at 96kHz. 96 kHz PCM Out (DV-400V only) 96kHz > 48kHz 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. 96kHz 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG > PCM MPEG encoded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. HDMI Out LPCM (2CH) Set if your monitor or device only accepts stereo input. On this setting multichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM (5.1CH) (DV-600AV only) Set if the monitor or device you have connected using HDMI is compatible with Liner PCM multi-channel formats. All audio signals are output as linear PCM 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to decode all streams by a player) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. SACD sources are output as linear PCM. Auto (DSD) (DV-600AV only) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Choose this option when you want to change the Digital Audio Out , SACD playback and Speakers settings. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 40 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 52 .) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. 16:9 (Compressed) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920 x 1080p , 1920 x 1080i or 1280 x 720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definition television (with black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for details). The PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. See also Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls on page 13. Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. AV Connector Out Video Ordinary (composite) video output, compatible with all TVs. RGB If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the best picture quality. Note that there is no output from the component jacks when this setting selected. HDMI Resolution 1920x1080p Set if your TV supports 1 920 x 1080 pixel progressive-scan video. 1920x1080i Set if your TV supports 1920 x 1080 pixel interlace video. 1280x720p Set if your TV supports 1280 x 720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p (NTSC) / 720x576p (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel (NTSC) / 720 x 576 pixel (PAL) progressive-scan video. 720x480i (NTSC) / 720x576i (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel (NTSC) / 720 x 576 pixel (PAL) interlace video. HDMI Color Full range RGB If colors are weak, this gives brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appear overly rich on the Full Range RGB setting. Component Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI- compatible devices). DV600AV_UK_EN.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 41 En English Language settings Display settings Setting Option What it means Audio Language English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying external subtitle files on page 9.) English If there are English subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there is the subtitle language selected on the disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). DVD Menu Lang. w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). Setting Option What it means OSD Language English On-screen displays of the player are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicator On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 42 En Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter a 4- digit password. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock on page 42. DVD Playback Mode (DV-600AV only) DVD-Audio All material on a DVD-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD-Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback (DV-600AV only) 2ch Area Selects the 2 channel (strereo) SACD audio area of the disc for playback. Multi-ch Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to regular stereo. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content on page 44. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Pass word Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 43 En English Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and press ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level and press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country/Area code and press ENTER . There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you will return to the Options menu screen. Note that the new Country/Area code doesnâÂÂt take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). DTS Downmix ⢠Default setting: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 39 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mode on page 45, you can choose the way the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-channel stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatible with Dolby surround matrix decoders. (This allows you to hear surround sound if your AV receiver or amplifier has Dolby Pro Logic capability.) Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 44 En About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for your player, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on- screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Yo ur registration code is: To learn more visit www.divx.com/v od Done DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 45 En English Speakers settings (DV-600AV only) Audio Output Mode (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default setting: 2 Channel If you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs (front, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if you connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Output Mode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only get sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 channel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel , only the front left/right channels are output from the AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Change to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because you are listening through the TVâÂÂs built-in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. ⢠If you set to 2 Channel , Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels so you still hear all the audio recorded on the disc. With DTS encoded audio, you can choose how the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downmix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel audio regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only. See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The player outputs 5.1 channel analog audio. See also Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. See also Speaker Installation on page 50. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. Speaker Distance on page 49. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud io Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 46 En About the audio output settings (DV-600AV only) The table below shows how the audio settings you make in the Initial Settings menu (see page 38) affect the output from the 2 channel and the 5.1 channel analog outputs, and from the digital outputs with various types of disc. * 1 When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L / R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. * 2 Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > PCM or DTS > PCM setting (page 39) * 3 Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 39) * 4 Discs that prohibit downmixing will be output as 5.1 channel even if 2 Channel is selected as the Audio Output Mode setting (see page 45). * 5 Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. * 6 When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are heard from the center speaker only. Disc audio format Player setting Front L / R â â â â â â â â â â â âÂÂâ Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW â Front L / R Front L / R Front L / R Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right *6 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2ch downmix 2ch downmix 2ch downmix *4 2ch downmix *5 2ch downmix *5 2ch downmix 2ch downmix Front L / R 2ch downmix Front L / R 2ch downmix 2 Ch 5.1 Ch 2 Ch 5.1 Ch Front L/R analog outputs *1 Surround L/R Center , SW , outputs *1 Digital outputs PCM convert *2 Bitstream *3 Dolby Digital Dolby Digital karaoke 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch Linear PCM 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DTS MPEG 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DVD-Audio 2 Ch 5.1 Ch Super Audio CD 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DTS CD CD Video CD DVD-RW (VR mode) DVD Dolby Digital â 2ch downmix DTS DTS Dolby Digital Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Dolby Digital MPEG or PCM MPEG DV600AV_UK_EN.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 47 En English About the HDMI audio output settings The table below shows how the audio settings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 39) and Audio Output Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 45) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. * 1 These formats include DVD-RW discs. * 2 If the connected component is not DVD-Audio (CPPM) compatible, it is not possible to output CPPM copy-controlled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48 below for more on this). * 3 If the discs prohibit downmixing, output Front L/R. * 4 If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with Multi-ch formats, the output signal is the same as LPCM (2CH) setting. * 5 If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with these compressed formats, the signal is output as linear PCM. * 6 If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with protected audio contents(such as DVD-Audio or SACD), SACD audio is not output from the HDMI terminal. * 7 Analog SACD audio is not output when you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . CD DV -600A V : DV -400V : 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch (DSD) *4, 7 Disc audio format DVD-Audio (with CPPM) *2 DVD-Audio (without CPPM) Linear PCM *1 MPEG *1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital *1 DTS CD/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right Auto (DSD) Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 DTS *5 DTS *5 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Left / Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD CD Disc audio format Linear PCM *1 MPEG *1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital *1 DTS Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 Left / Right Left / Right DTS *5 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD Super Audio CD * 6 Left/Right CD/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC DV600AV_UK_EN.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 48 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources (DV-600AV only) The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connected component. * 1 This unit checks the specification of the connected component (such sample rate / multi- channel limitations and compatibility with protected audio contents) and outputs the signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio compatibleâ indicates compatibility with protected audio contents. âÂÂSACD compatibleâ indicates compatibility with DSD signals. * 2 If HDMI Out setting (page 39) is set to LPCM (2CH) , DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output.) For SACD sources, the 2 channel (stereo) SACD audio area is selected. If the video output resolution is 480i, 576i, 480p or 576p, audio output may be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected component). * 3 In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output. * 4 If CPPM shows in the front panel display, it means it is not possible to output CPPM copycon- trolled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel output. Component specification Disc Format (DVD-Audio or SACD) 2 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI *1 DVD-Audio and 2 channel compatible on HDMI *1 Left/Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Incompatible with DVD-Audio on HDMI *1 2 ch 2 ch VSX-AX4A Vi-s VSX-AX2A V -s PDP-506HDE/FDE PDP-436XDE/FDE PDP-505XDE/HDE 5.1 ch No sound *4 No sound *4 5.1 ch *2 Component/output Example Component SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI *1 2 ch VSX-AX4A S i-s VSX-AX2A S -s 5.1 ch *2 No sound Auto (DSD) SACD No sound No sound DSD 2ch/5.1 ch DV600AV_UK_EN.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 49 En English Speaker Distance (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default settings: all speakers 3.0 m You only need to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround sound from your system, you should set up the speaker distances from your listening position. 1 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. ⢠The L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2 Press î (cursor right) to change the speaker distance for the highlighted speaker. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settings of the front left ( L ) or front right ( R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances change relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L / R ) speaker distances can be set from 30 cm to 9 m in 30 cm incre- ments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from âÂÂ2.1 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ6.0 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press î (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and MPEG-audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ0.9 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud io Output Mode î 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 50 En Speaker Installation (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default settings: L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a speaker. ⢠The L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2 Press î (cursor right) to modify the selected speaker. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of your changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the main speaker cone in the speaker is 12cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have that speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the center and surround speakers are automatically set to Small and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4 Press î (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud i o Output Mode î 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 51 En English Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp- tipped writing instrument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on discs as these can cause the disc to warp slightly during playback causing distortion in the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on discs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit before cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleaners. Never use thinners, benzine or insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit. If you use a chemical-impregnated cleaning cloth, read the instructions carefully before use. These cloths may leave smear marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry cloth. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. We do not recommend using commercially available lens cleaners for CD players. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 52 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on. Moving the player If you need to move the player, first press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playbackâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratios, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions, too, come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wide) or 16:9 (Compressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note that some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though you have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a standard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letter box format regardless of the setting. Note ⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compressed) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 53 En English Setting the TV system The default setting of this player is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you experience picture distor- tion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. Doing this, however, may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds of disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 If the player is on, press î STANDBY/ ON to switch it to standby. 2 Using the front panel controls, hold down î then press î STANDBY/ON to switch the TV system. The TV system changes as follows: ⢠AUTO î NTSC ⢠NTSC î PAL ⢠PAL î AUTO Note ⢠You have to switch the player into standby (press î STANDBY/ON ) before each change. Resetting the player Use this procedure to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the factory default. 1 Switch the player into standby. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the î (stop) button and press î STANDBY/ON to switch the player back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings are now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs carry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear panel. Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. In this case the attention sentence Incompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will play in any player. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Disc Player setting Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD/Super VCD/Video CD/ DivX Video/ WMV NTSC NTSC P AL NTSC PAL NTSC P AL PA L CD/MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG no disc â NTSC P AL NTSC or P AL 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 54 En Selecting languages using the language code list Some of the language options (such as âÂÂDVD Menu Lang.â in the Initial Settings) allow you to set your preferred language from any of the 136 languages listed in the language code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 61 for a complete list of languages and codes. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified after checking the items below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number Can't play discâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does not conform with the IEC standards might not play normally. DVD-Audio playback stops. ⢠The disc may have been illegally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press î , then start playback again ( î ). ⢠Press and hold the front panel î STANDBY/ON button for about 10 seconds to switch the unit off, then press again to switch back on. ⢠Switch the power off once, unplug from the wall socket, then plug back in and switch on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed while a disc is playing, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press î , then start playback again ( î ). DV600AV_UK_EN.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 55 En English Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for --OFF-- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesn't seem to work. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 18). ⢠The batteries are exhausted: Put in new ones (page 6). No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connections: Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. Also check the video cable for damage. ⢠TV/monitor or AV amplifier settings are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the connected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progressive but your TV/monitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 13 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 52 for how to set it correctly for your TV/monitor. Picture disturbance during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Due to the playerâÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. No audio, or audio is distorted. ⢠No audio is output during slow motion playback or when scanning discs other than audio CDs and SACDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the player's analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Check that all interconnects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminals are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessary. Also check the cable for damage. ⢠Make sure the player's output is not connected to the amplifier's phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/receiverâÂÂs settings (volume, input function, speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio signal. ⢠Make sure that the Digital Out setting is set to On (page 39). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/receiverâÂÂcheck the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver. ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the playerâÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunction. Problem Remedy DV600AV_UK_EN.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 45). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG Out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/receiverâÂÂcheck the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver. ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not output multichannel digital audio. Listen through the playerâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 50). ⢠Check the audio options available from the disc menu. Cannot listen to high- sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make sure that Linear PCM Out/96 kHz PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz (page 39). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. Cannot output 192kHz or 176.4kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digital audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot output 96kHz or 88.2kHz digital audio. ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out/96 kHz PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz (page 39). ⢠Some discs are digital copy protected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio output. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-DTS compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 39). If you do not do this, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected to a DTS-compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, check the amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mix does not sound right or sounds incomplete (for example, inaudible dialog). ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel if you've connected to the stereo inputs on your amplifier or TV (page 47). The audio recorded on a Super VCD disc is not output properly. ⢠If the audio is switched to [2] when playing a Super VCD that contains only one stereo soundtrack, there may be no sound at all. Press AUDIO to change the soundtrack. CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtual Surround. ⢠Virtual Surround does not work with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual Surround effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (2ch) analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel (page 45). ⢠The effectiveness of Virtual Surround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV600AV_UK_EN.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 57 En English HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio output. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 39.) ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Interface). Depending on the component you have connected, unreliable signal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the source component is only DVI/HDCP -compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connected using the HDMI inter face are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI video output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connected using the HDMI inter face are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Inter face). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16 if you want to reset the output resolution. No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HDMI Out setting is set to Auto , Auto (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (see HDMI Out on page 39 to do this). See also About the HDMI audio output settings on page 47 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1 ch) jack when connected via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 39.) Component Out cannot be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resolution is set to 720 x 480i (NTSC)/720 x 576i (PAL) . DV600AV_UK_EN.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 58 En USB troubleshooting Note ⢠Static electricity or other external influences may cause malfunctioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the power cord and then plug back in. This will usually reset the unit for proper operation. If this does not correct the problem, please consult your nearest Pioneer service center. A connected DVI component (with HDCP) doesnâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Inter face). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage device is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32. ⢠USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in the Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the correct file extension: .mp3 for MP3 files; .wma for WMA files; .m4a for MPEG-4 AAC files; .jpg for JPEG files (upper or lower- case is OK). ⢠Make sure the file permission hasnâÂÂt been restricted (through a password, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG- 4 AAC files. ⢠The files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management) or FairPlay copy-protection. This is not a malfunction. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 59 En English Glossary Analog audio Direct representation of sound by an electrical signal. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3; widescreen models are 16:9. Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. Digital audio Indirect representation of sound using numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . DivX DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expresses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by FUJI FILM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-speed digital interface which has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi- channel surround-sound audio on a single digital connection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A standard file format used for still images. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂ. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are recognized by the extention âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some files purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iTunes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CD/ Super VCDs and some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD/ Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality, but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG encoded audio. See also Digital audio . DV600AV_UK_EN.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 60 En Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a video picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace which takes two passes to update the whole picture). Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate DVD-Video discs and players with particular areas of the world. See DVD-Video regions on page 53 for more information. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. See also Digital audio . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. WMV WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 61 En English Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118 , kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DV600AV_UK_EN.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 62 En Specifications General Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . 0.8 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 kg Dimensions DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) AV Connector (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R out 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level. . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA S-video output (DV-600AV only) Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Digital audio characteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 dB Total harmonic distortion DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0023 % DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0065 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Optical digital output (DV-600AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical 1 357 9 1 1 1 3 1 51 7 1 92 1 24 68 1 0 1 2 14 16 18 20 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 63 En English Accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating instructions The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1471-A> Printed in Thailand <07C00001> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. http://www .pioneer .co.uk http://www .pioneer .eu PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recover y and recycling. P rivate households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). F or countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessar y treatment, recover y and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. K058_A_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A DV600AV_UK_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product includes FontAvenueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En IMPORT ANT : THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by AST A or BSI to BS1362. Check for the AST A mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover , you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer . If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut of f and disposed of safely. There is a danger of sever e electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please obser ve the wiring code as shown below . If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORT ANT : The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BL UE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En DV600AV_UK_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Content s 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using a SCART AV cable . . . . . 12 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 12 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 04 Getting started Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 20 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 05 Playing discs Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 26 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Browsing DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching audio language/channels . . . . . 33 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 34 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . 38 Digital Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About the HDMI audio output settings . . . 47 HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 09 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs . . . . . 51 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . 52 Setting the TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 5 En English Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDMI 1 digital interface The HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) interconnect provides high quality digital audio and video, all from a single user- friendly connector. HDMI is the first consumer electronics interface to support uncompressed standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround sound audio 2 , all using one interface. You can easily connect to a HDMI- equipped AV receiver or audiovisual device for high quality audio and video, and communication between the video source and (DTV) players, set-top boxes, and other audiovisual devices is also supported. ⢠Super VCD compatible This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD stan- dard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. ⢠PureCinema Progressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan- compatible TV or monitor using the component video outputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠New Disc Navigator with moving pictures The new Disc Navigator enables you play the first few seconds of each title or chapter in a thumbnail image on screen. ⢠DSP effects for enhanced playback See Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus on page 36. ⢠Picture zoom See Zooming the screen on page 33. ⢠MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC compatibility See Compressed audio compatibility on page 8. ⢠JPEG compatibility See JPEG file compatibility on page 10. ⢠DivX î3 video compatibility See DivX video compatibility on page 10. ⢠WMV compatibility See CD-R/-RW compatibility on page 8 or About WMV on page 10. ⢠Energy saving design An auto power-off function switches the player into standby if not used for about 30 minutes. DV-600AV only: ⢠DVD-Audio and SACD compatible Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD). 1. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. 2. It is not possible to output SACD or DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection of this player of this player. (DV- 400V only) 3. DV-600AV: DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DV-400V: DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En ⢠24-bit/192 kHz compatible DAC The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC means that this player is fully compatible with high sampling-rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low-level resolution and high-frequency detail. ⢠Built-in Dolby 1 Digital and DTS 2 decoding with multichannel outputs This player features multichannel analog outputs for connection to an AV amplifier to give you stunning surround sound from Dolby Digital, DTS and multichannel DVD-Audio discs. DV-400V only: ⢠24-bit/96 kHz compatible DAC The integrated 24-bit/96 kHz DAC means that this player is compatible with high sampling- rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low- level resolution and high-frequency detail. ⢠Excellent audio performance surround sound entertainment with Dolby Digital 1 and DTS 3 software When connected to a suitable AV amplifier or receiver, this player gives great surround sound with Dolby Digital and DTS discs. WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Power cable ⢠Operating instructions ⢠Warranty card Putting the batteries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when youâÂÂre finished. Important Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery togetherâÂÂalthough they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. 1. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro LogicâÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. 3. âÂÂDTSâ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and âÂÂDTS 2.0 Digital Outâ is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En English ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this product for years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choosing a suitable location: Do... ⢠Use in a well-ventilated room. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where the player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or other room where the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playback compatibility This player is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. Please also note that recordable discs cannot be recorded using this player. *DVD-Audio and SACD can only be played back on the DV-600AV. ⢠This unit will play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJI FILM Corporation. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-V ideo DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD F ujicolor CD Super VCD DV600AV_UK_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content video, audio, etc. while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG or DivX video/WMV files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠Multi-session playback: No ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/DVD RW compatibility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs recorded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. However, some editing made during the recording may not be played back accurately. DVD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: DVD-Video, Video Recording (VR)* * Edit points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized playback: No ⢠MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playback on DVD-R/-RW: No Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encoding compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: No (DRM-protected audio files will not play in this playerâÂÂsee also DRM in the Glossary on page 59) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files â do not use for other file types) About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio compression technology. The file format and extension used depend on the application used to encode the AAC file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes î bearing the extension ' .m4a '. DRM- protected files will not play, and files encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display incorrectly. Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En English WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This player can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. This player can play DivX videos burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. Displaying external subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language settings on page 41) to match the subtitle file. This player supports the following language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. ⢠For external subtitle files the following subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not shown within the disc navigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 Turkish (tr) DV600AV_UK_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En DivX video compatibility DV-600AV: ⢠Official DivX î Ultra Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media files and the DivX î Media Format. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. DV-400V: ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. About WMV WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Mediaî Encoder. ⢠This player is compatible with WMV9 files that are encoded by using the Windows Mediaî Encoder 9 Series, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profile is not supported. ⢠DRM-protected video files will not play in this player. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File format used by digital still cameras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg (must be used for the player to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this player. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 11 En English Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup described here is a basic setup that allows you to play discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo audio is played through the speakers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video or S-video cables, as the picture from this player will not appear properly on your TV. (This player may also not be compatible with some combination TV/VCRs for the same reason; refer to the manufacturer for more information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jacks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cable, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plug to the video output. Make sure you match up the left and right audio outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. See below if you want to use a component or S-video (DV-600AV only) or SCART cable for the video connection. 2 Connect the supplied AC power cable to the AC IN inlet, then p lug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplugging the player from the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using either the front panel î STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of the -OFF- message to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reasons, do not plug this player into a switched power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receivers. P R P B Y C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver VIDEO OUT AC IN S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R COAXI AL To audio/video inputs To power outlet Y ellow White Red TV DV -600A V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 12 En Connecting using a SCART AV cable A SCART-type AV connector is provided for connection to a TV or AV receiver. The video output is switchable between ordinary composite, S-video (DV-600AV only) and RGB. See AV Connector Out on page 40 for how to set it. The SCART AV connector also outputs analog audio, so there is no need to also connect the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jacks. ⢠Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV CONNECTOR (RGB) output to a SCART AV input on your TV (or AV receiver). Connecting using the S-video output (DV-600AV only) If your TV (or other equipment) has an S-video (S1) input, you can use the S-video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-video input on your TV (or monitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with the same mark on the plug before plugging in. AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIA L TV To SCART A V input DV -600A V P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V TV To S-video input DV600AV_UK_EN.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 13 En English Connecting using the component video output You can use the component video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipment). This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor or AV receiver. Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the component video output. Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. To set up the player for use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 40. When the player is set to output progressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, switch everything off and reconnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 11), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls Switch the player to standby then, using the front panel controls, press î STANDBY/ON while pressing î to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interlace output. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaultâÂÂsee Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16.) P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT A UDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV -600A V î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Connecting to an AV receiver You can connect this player to your AV receiver using the multichannel analog outputs or one of the digital outputs. In addition to these connections, you should also connect the 2 channel analog outputs for compatibility with all discs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a standard (composite) connection). 1 Connect the analog AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R and VIDEO OUT jacks on this player to a set of analog audio and video inputs on your AV receiver. 2 Connect the AV receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. You can also use the SCART AV connector, the S-video (DV-600AV only) or component video jacks to connect to the AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable between your DVD player and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. Connecting the multichannel analog outputs (DV-600AV only) If your AV receiver has 5.1 channel analog inputs, we recommend connecting this player to it using the multichannel analog outputs. Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dolby Digital and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multichannel DVD-Audio and SACD discs. ⢠Connect the multi-channel audio outputs on this player to the multi-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRONT , one for the SURROUND and one for the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channels. You can also use the SCART AV connector, the S-video (DV-600AV only) or component video jacks to connect to the AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connecting up and switching on, you should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Channel . See also Audio Output Mode on page 45. P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT A UDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V AV receiver To audio/video inputs P R P B Y CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600AV AV receiver To multi-channel audio inputs DV600AV_UK_EN.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 15 En English Connecting the digital output This player has both optical and coaxial-type digital audio outputs for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is convenient. Depending on the capabilities of your AV receiver, you might have to set up this player to output only digital audio in a compatible format. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 and refer to the operating instructions that came with your AV receiver. Note that SACD audio is not output through these jacks, so this connection should be in addition to, rather than instead of, a 5.1 channel analog connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this player to a digital input on your AV receiver. DV-600AV only: For an optical connection, use an optical cable (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to an optical input on your AV receiver. For a coaxial connection, use a coaxial cable (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to a coaxial input on your AV receiver. Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercially available HDMI cable. The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the player is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see below for limitations), SACD, Video CD/Super VCD, CD, WMA, MP3, MPEG-4, AAC, Divx video and WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this player to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI- compatible monitor. The arrow on the cable connector body should be face up for correct alignment with the connector on the player. DV -600A V AV CONNECTOR (RGB) TV/ AV Receiver AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIA L AV receiver To coaxial/optical digital input P R P B Y C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R DV -600A V HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV600AV_UK_EN.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En Note ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠When you change the component connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI settings to match the new component (see HDMI Out on page 39, HDMI Resolution on page 40 and HDMI Color on page 40 to do this). However, the settings for each component are then stored in memory (for up to 2 components). ⢠DV-600AV : The HDMI connection is compatible with 2 channel linear PCM signals (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/ 24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bitstream, multi channel DSD, and multi channel linear PCM signals, (5.1 channel signals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/ 24 bit). ⢠DV-400V : The HDMI connection is compatible with 44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2 channel linear PCM signals, as well as Doldy Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream. About HDMI HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection Switch the player to standby then, using the front panel controls, press î STANDBY/ON while pressing î to switch the player back to 576P/480P . î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En English Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON (page 19) 2 Disc tray 3 TOP MENU (page 23) 4 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 19) 5 MENU (page 23) 6 RETURN (page 23) 7 HOME MENU (page 19) 8 Display 9 î OPEN/CLOSE (page 21) 10 î (page 22) 11 î (page 22) 12 î (page 22) 13 î and î (page 22) 14 HDMI indicator Lights when this player is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HDCP compatible component. 15 DVD/USB (page 35) 16 USB port (Type A) (page 35) 17 RW Compatible (page 8) MENU TOP MENU î STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE USB DVD/USB HDMI HOME MENU RETURN î î î î î î ENTER USB DVD/USB HDMI MENU TOP MENU STANDBY/ ON OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU ENTER RETURN î î î î î îÂÂî 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV -600A V 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV -400V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Remote control 1 î STANDBY/ON (page 19) 2 AUDIO (page 33) 3 SUBTITLE (page 32) 4 Number buttons (page 22) 5 TOP MENU (page 23) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 19) 7 HOME MENU (page 19) 8 î and îÂÂ/î (page 22, 26) 9 î (page 22) 10 î (page 22) 11 î (page 22) 12 PLAY MODE (page 29) 13 SURROUND (page 36) 14 î OPEN/CLOSE (page 21) 15 ANGLE (page 34) 16 DVD/USB (page 35) 17 CLEAR (page 31) 18 MENU (page 23) 19 RETURN (page 19) 20 î and îÂÂ/î (page 22, 26) 21 î (page 22) 22 î (page 22) 23 DISPLAY (page 34) 24 ZOOM (page 33) Using the remote control Keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The remote has a range of about 7 m. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. 0 1 23 4 5 6 789 DVD/ CLEAR USB ANGLE A UDIO TOP MENU HOME MENU SUBTITLE PLAY MODE SURROUND ZOOM DISPLAY MENU RETURN ENTER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î î îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î î î î î î 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 3 9 11 22 24 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 19 En English Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is connected properly and that the player is plugged in, press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel or remote control to switch the player on. Also, switch on your TV and make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DVD player switches on but there is nothing displayed on my TV. Make sure that the TV is set to the correct video input (not a TV channel). For example, if you connected this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switch your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver and an auto power off function. If the player is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is closed but no disc is playing and no control is pressed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this player makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. Note ⢠From here on in this manual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î DV -600A V î ST ANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display . îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons on the remote work in exactly the same way). RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes. GUIDE RETURN ENTER HOME MENU RETURN DV -600A V MENU TOP MENU OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN î î ENTER ENTER DV600AV_UK_EN.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂTV Screenâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16:9 (Wide)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Letter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Video Output settings on page 40 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on- screen displays. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ settings. 3 Select a language. The on-screen language will change according to your selection. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out AV Connector Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Vide o Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En English Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/ WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the next chapter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPEG slideshow on page 27. Important ⢠DVD Audio and SACD files can only be played back on the DV-600AV. ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD- R/-RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD, disc containing DivX video/WMV files or Video CD/Super VCD, also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). 4 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, an on-screen menu may appear. See DVD-Video and DivX disc menus on page 23 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 24 for more on how to navigate these. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a containing DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback starts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If a disc contains a mixture of movie (DivX video/WMV) and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the movie files ( DivX/WMV )or the other media file types ( MP3/WMA/MPEG- 4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. 0 1 23 4 56 789 STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER î î î îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î î î î î î DV600AV_UK_EN.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. The following chapter covers other playback features in more detail. Resume and Last Memory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/Super VCD or DivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown in the display indicating that you can resume playback again from that point. If the disc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows RESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press î (stop) while RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, if you take the disc out of the player after stopping playback, the last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the same one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you can resume playback. Note ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD discs. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press î OPEN/CLOSE to stop playback and open the disc tray. Button What it does î Starts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) î P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. î Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. î (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î (remote only) P ress to start fast for ward scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titles/chapters. î Skips to the next track, title or chapter . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (for DVD-Audio) or track (for CD/SACD/Video CD /Super VCD ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD- Video) or track (DVD-Audio*/ SACD/CD/Video CD/Super VCD). *within the current group DV600AV_UK_EN.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En English DVD-Video and DivX disc menus Some DivX media files and many DVD-Video and DVD-Audio discs feature menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give access to additional features, such as subtitle and audio language selection, or special features such as slideshows. See the disc packaging for details. Sometimes DivX and DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this group you first have to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. ⢠The DivX menu can only be displayed on DV-600AV. TO P MENU MENU RETURN ENTER 0 1 23 4 56 789 Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or DivX media ï¬Âles) menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously dis- played menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring brows- able pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than the î (play) button. FAQ ⢠After I load a DVD disc, it ejects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your player. The region number should be printed on the disc; check it against the region number of the player (which you can find on the rear panel). See also DVD- Video regions on page 53. If the region number is OK, it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean the disc and look for signs of damage. See also Taking care of your player and discs on page 51. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and undamaged. See Taking care of your player and discs on page 51 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded correctly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probably an incompatible format or disc type, such as DVD-Audio ( for DV-400V ) or DVD-ROM. See Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for more on disc compatibility. â¢I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some discs? Some movie formats are such that even when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessary at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. â¢I have a standard (4:3) TV and set the player to show widescreen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still get black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the player, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letter box format. This is not a malfunction. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered menu option. P ress ENTER to select. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). 0 1 23 4 56 789 RETURN î î î ENTER DV600AV_UK_EN.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En English ⢠IâÂÂve connected to a HDMI compatible component but I canâÂÂt get any signal and the front panel HDMI indicator wonâÂÂt light! Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HDMI compatibility. ⢠ThereâÂÂs no picture from the HDMI output! This player cannot display pictures from DVI compatible sources. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HDMI compatibility. Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. ⢠My AV receiver is definitely compatible with 96 kHz/88.2 kHz Linear PCM audio, but it doesnâÂÂt seem to work with this player. WhatâÂÂs wrong? (DV-600AV only) For digital copy-protection purposes, some 96 kHz/88.2 kHz DVD discs only output digital audio downsampled to 48 kHz/ 44.1 kHz. This is not a malfunction. To fully take advantage of the high sampling rate audio, connect the analog audio outputs to your amplifier/receiver. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear SACD audio through the digital outputs? (DV-600AV only) SACD digital audio is only available through the HDMI outputs when connected to an HDMI-compatible amp that can handle protected audio contents. Some DVD-Audio discs too only output audio through the analog outputs. ⢠Is it better to listen to DVD-Audio discs through the analog outputs? (DV-600AV only) Some DVD-Audio discs do not output anything through the digital outputs, and multichannel discs are downmixed to stereo for the digital output. In addition, high sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (higher than 96kHz) automatically downsample audio output from the digital outputs. Using the multichannel analog audio outputs for DVD-Audio have none of these limitations. ⢠My DVD-Audio disc starts playing, but then suddenly stops! (DV-600AV only) The disc may have been illegally copied. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 26 En Chapter 5 Playing discs Note ⢠Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD and SACD discs, Video CDs/Super VCDs, CDs, DivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠DVD-Audio and SACD discs can only be played back on DV-600AV. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed for DivX video/WMV). 1 During playback, press î or î to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVDs (including DVD-Audio), DivX video/WMV and Video CD/Super VCDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠When scanning a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode or a MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, forwards and backwards. Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV can be played at four different forward slow motion speeds. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press and hold îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î until slow motion playback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠There is no sound during slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 27 En English Viewing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/-RW containing JPEG picture files, press î (play) to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. ⢠If the folder contains MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC file repeats. During the audio playback, you can still use the skip ( îÂÂ/ î ), scan ( îÂÂ/î ) and pause ( î ) functions. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may notice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Browsing DVD or Video CD / Super VCD disc with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/- RW or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Disc Navigator with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loaded and whether the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumbnails from a Video CD /Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Title â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Play List: Time â Thumbnails from the Play List at 10 minute intervals. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. î Displays the next picture. îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and ï¬Âips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Disc Navigator Disc Navigator Title Chapter DV600AV_UK_EN.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 28 En The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press î / î (you donâÂÂt have to wait for all the thumbnails to finish playing to display the previous/next page). 3 Select the thumbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number buttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 32. Browsing WMA, MP3 , MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video , WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there are other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to navigate. Use the cursor up/down buttons ( îÂÂ/î ) to move up and down the folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( î ) to return to the parent folder. Use ENTER or cursor right ( î ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also return to the parent folder by going to the top of the list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play the highlighted track or DivX video/WMV file or display the highlighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC or DivX video/WMV file is selected, playback begins, starting with the selected file, and continues until the end of the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a slideshow begins, starting with that file, and continues to the end of the folder. 01 04 02 05 03 06 Disc Navigator: Title 01- 49: - - 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 File1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Folder 2 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps DV600AV_UK_EN.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 29 En English Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback. Simply select the audio file you want to listen to followed by the JPEG from which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slideshow and the audio files repeats. Playback controls are effective for the JPEG slideshow only. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navigator and start playback using the î (play) button. Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD, Video CD/Super VCD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD- RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/DivX video/WMV files. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 30). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repeat play with Video CD/ Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and random play at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRepeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a repeat play option. If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. The repeat options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video and DVD-RW discs, you can select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For SACDs,CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV600AV_UK_EN.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 30 En ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for some DivX media files, select Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). Using random play Use the random play function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), Groups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Audio, SACD, CD, Video CD/ Super VCD) at random. (Note that the same track/title/chapter may play more than once.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. Important ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the random play menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/WMV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You can't use random play together with program or repeat play. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a random play option. The random play options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video discs, you can select Random Title or Random Chapter (or Random Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Random Track , (or Random Off ). ⢠For CDs, SACDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during random play: Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters/groups/tracks on a disc. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/WMV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does î Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. î Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV600AV_UK_EN.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 31 En English 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chapter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a CD, SACD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠You can insert steps into the middle of a program list by just highlighting the position where you want the new step to appear and entering a title/chapter/group/ track number. ⢠To delete a step, highlight it and press CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit. ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). î Skip to the next step in the program list. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 32 En Searching a disc You can search DVD-Video discs by title or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CDs and Video CD/ Super VCDs by track number or time; DivX video /WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter number. Important ⢠Search functions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a search mode. The search options available depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title, chapter or track number, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video/WMV) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 41. ⢠See Displaying external subtitle files on page 9 for more on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV600AV_UK_EN.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 33 En English Switching audio language/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. When playing a VR format DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, sub, and mixed channels during playback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to switch channelsâÂÂsee the disc box for details. (When you change the audio channel, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video CD/Super VCD, you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. 1 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language/channel option. The language/channel information is shown on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 41. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video/WMV title or Video CD/Super VCD or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor (Normal, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/WMV title and JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 34 En Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Display settings on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be displayed on-screen while a disc is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeatedly. ⢠When a disc is playing, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
USB playback 06 35 En English Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB interface It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch JPEG files using the USB interface on the front of this unit. Connect a USB mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this unit. ⢠With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠The Home Menu cannot be displayed while using the USB mode. 1 With the player switched on, press DVD/USB. Make sure your TV is on and set to the correct video input, and that USB MODE is showing on the front panel display. 2 Connect your USB device. The USB terminal is located on the front panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠The method of playback for files saved on a USB device is the same as for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback controls on page 22 and Playing discs on page 26. 4 Turn off this player and remove the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on it will start up in USB mode. To return to DVD mode, either press DVD/USB or press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. Important If a USB ERR message lights in the display, it may mean that the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this player, or that the device is incompatible. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Reconnecting the USB device with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front panel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , then once again select USB mode ( USB MODE will appear in the front panel display). ⢠Using a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible. î STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI î î USB mass storage device USB (T ype A) DV -600A V DV600AV_UK_EN.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 36 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Settings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select and change settings using the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . Audio DRC ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quieter sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while controlling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much change. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective through the digital output when Digital Out is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Audio Out settings on page 39). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and AV receiver settings. Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. Tip ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the remote control to switch Virtual Surround on. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠DV-600AV only: The Audio Output Mode (see page 45) must be set to 2 Channel in order to be able to use Virtual Surround. ⢠If the player is outputting Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtual Surround has no effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 for how to set up the digital output formats. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Aud i o DRC Dialog On Off DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 37 En English ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Equalizer (DV-400V only) ⢠Settings: Rock , Pop , Live , Dance , Techno , Classic , Soft , Off (default) The various preset EQ curves are designed to suit various styles of music. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if the Equalizer is switched on. Dialog ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (default) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Make settings using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . You can adjust the following picture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of the picture ( High , Medium , Low , Off (default) ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR (DV-600AV only) â Switches on/off block noise reduction ( On, Off (default)). Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Chroma Level settings using the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. V ideo Adjust Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 Off 0 0 Off î î î î î î î Video Adjust DV -600A V screen Brightness min max 0 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 38 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu provides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you want to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table below, the default setting is shown in bold : other settings are shown in italics . ⢠The Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of this player to an AV receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the operating instructions supplied with your other equipment to see which digital audio formats itâÂÂs compatible with. ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. ⢠The HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDMI- compatible component using the HDMI connector. ⢠The Digital Audio Out , Component Out , AV Connector Out, SACD Playback (DV-600AV only) and Speakers (DV-600AV only) settings cannot be set if the player is connected to an HDMI- compatible component using the HDMI connector. Additionally, certain settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV600AV_UK_EN.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 39 En English Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Note that there is no digital output when playing SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs regardless of this setting. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoded digital audio is output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD disc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/receiver is not compatible with DTS audio.) DTS > PCM No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. Linear PCM Out (DV-600AV only) Down Sample On 96kHz digital audio is converted to 48kHz for digital output. Note that High sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (192kHz or 176.4kHz) automatically output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs. Down Sample Off 96kHz digital audio is output as is at 96kHz. 96 kHz PCM Out (DV-400V only) 96kHz > 48kHz 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. 96kHz 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG > PCM MPEG encoded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. HDMI Out LPCM (2CH) Set if your monitor or device only accepts stereo input. On this setting multichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM (5.1CH) (DV-600AV only) Set if the monitor or device you have connected using HDMI is compatible with Liner PCM multi-channel formats. All audio signals are output as linear PCM 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to decode all streams by a player) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. SACD sources are output as linear PCM. Auto (DSD) (DV-600AV only) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Choose this option when you want to change the Digital Audio Out , SACD playback and Speakers settings. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 40 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 52 .) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. 16:9 (Compressed) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920 x 1080p , 1920 x 1080i or 1280 x 720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definition television (with black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for details). The PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. See also Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls on page 13. Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. AV Connector Out Video Ordinary (composite) video output, compatible with all TVs. RGB If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the best picture quality. Note that there is no output from the component jacks when this setting selected. HDMI Resolution 1920x1080p Set if your TV supports 1 920 x 1080 pixel progressive-scan video. 1920x1080i Set if your TV supports 1920 x 1080 pixel interlace video. 1280x720p Set if your TV supports 1280 x 720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p (NTSC) / 720x576p (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel (NTSC) / 720 x 576 pixel (PAL) progressive-scan video. 720x480i (NTSC) / 720x576i (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel (NTSC) / 720 x 576 pixel (PAL) interlace video. HDMI Color Full range RGB If colors are weak, this gives brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appear overly rich on the Full Range RGB setting. Component Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI- compatible devices). DV600AV_UK_EN.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 41 En English Language settings Display settings Setting Option What it means Audio Language English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying external subtitle files on page 9.) English If there are English subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there is the subtitle language selected on the disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). DVD Menu Lang. w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 54). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). Setting Option What it means OSD Language English On-screen displays of the player are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicator On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 42 En Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter a 4- digit password. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock on page 42. DVD Playback Mode (DV-600AV only) DVD-Audio All material on a DVD-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD-Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback (DV-600AV only) 2ch Area Selects the 2 channel (strereo) SACD audio area of the disc for playback. Multi-ch Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to regular stereo. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content on page 44. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Pass word Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 43 En English Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and press ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level and press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country/Area code and press ENTER . There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you will return to the Options menu screen. Note that the new Country/Area code doesnâÂÂt take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). DTS Downmix ⢠Default setting: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 39 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mode on page 45, you can choose the way the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-channel stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatible with Dolby surround matrix decoders. (This allows you to hear surround sound if your AV receiver or amplifier has Dolby Pro Logic capability.) Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 44 En About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for your player, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on- screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Playback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Yo ur registration code is: To learn more visit www.divx.com/v od Done DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 45 En English Speakers settings (DV-600AV only) Audio Output Mode (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default setting: 2 Channel If you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs (front, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if you connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Output Mode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only get sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 channel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel , only the front left/right channels are output from the AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Change to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because you are listening through the TVâÂÂs built-in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. ⢠If you set to 2 Channel , Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels so you still hear all the audio recorded on the disc. With DTS encoded audio, you can choose how the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downmix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel audio regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only. See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The player outputs 5.1 channel analog audio. See also Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. See also Speaker Installation on page 50. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. Speaker Distance on page 49. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud io Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 46 En About the audio output settings (DV-600AV only) The table below shows how the audio settings you make in the Initial Settings menu (see page 38) affect the output from the 2 channel and the 5.1 channel analog outputs, and from the digital outputs with various types of disc. * 1 When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L / R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. * 2 Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > PCM or DTS > PCM setting (page 39) * 3 Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 39) * 4 Discs that prohibit downmixing will be output as 5.1 channel even if 2 Channel is selected as the Audio Output Mode setting (see page 45). * 5 Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. * 6 When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are heard from the center speaker only. Disc audio format Player setting Front L / R â â â â â â â â â â â âÂÂâ Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW Surround L/R, Center , SW â Front L / R Front L / R Front L / R Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right *6 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2ch downmix 2ch downmix 2ch downmix *4 2ch downmix *5 2ch downmix *5 2ch downmix 2ch downmix Front L / R 2ch downmix Front L / R 2ch downmix 2 Ch 5.1 Ch 2 Ch 5.1 Ch Front L/R analog outputs *1 Surround L/R Center , SW , outputs *1 Digital outputs PCM convert *2 Bitstream *3 Dolby Digital Dolby Digital karaoke 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch 2 Ch / 5.1 Ch Linear PCM 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DTS MPEG 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DVD-Audio 2 Ch 5.1 Ch Super Audio CD 2 Ch 5.1 Ch DTS CD CD Video CD DVD-RW (VR mode) DVD Dolby Digital â 2ch downmix DTS DTS Dolby Digital Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Dolby Digital MPEG or PCM MPEG DV600AV_UK_EN.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 47 En English About the HDMI audio output settings The table below shows how the audio settings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 39) and Audio Output Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 45) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. * 1 These formats include DVD-RW discs. * 2 If the connected component is not DVD-Audio (CPPM) compatible, it is not possible to output CPPM copy-controlled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48 below for more on this). * 3 If the discs prohibit downmixing, output Front L/R. * 4 If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with Multi-ch formats, the output signal is the same as LPCM (2CH) setting. * 5 If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with these compressed formats, the signal is output as linear PCM. * 6 If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with protected audio contents(such as DVD-Audio or SACD), SACD audio is not output from the HDMI terminal. * 7 Analog SACD audio is not output when you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . CD DV -600A V : DV -400V : 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch (DSD) *4, 7 Disc audio format DVD-Audio (with CPPM) *2 DVD-Audio (without CPPM) Linear PCM *1 MPEG *1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital *1 DTS CD/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right Auto (DSD) Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 DTS *5 DTS *5 5.1 ch *4 5.1 ch *4 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Left / Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD CD Disc audio format Linear PCM *1 MPEG *1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital *1 DTS Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right MPEG *5 Dolby Digital *5 Dolby Digital *5 DTS *5 Left / Right Left / Right DTS *5 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD Super Audio CD * 6 Left/Right CD/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC DV600AV_UK_EN.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 48 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources (DV-600AV only) The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connected component. * 1 This unit checks the specification of the connected component (such sample rate / multi- channel limitations and compatibility with protected audio contents) and outputs the signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio compatibleâ indicates compatibility with protected audio contents. âÂÂSACD compatibleâ indicates compatibility with DSD signals. * 2 If HDMI Out setting (page 39) is set to LPCM (2CH) , DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output.) For SACD sources, the 2 channel (stereo) SACD audio area is selected. If the video output resolution is 480i, 576i, 480p or 576p, audio output may be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected component). * 3 In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output. * 4 If CPPM shows in the front panel display, it means it is not possible to output CPPM copycon- trolled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel output. Component specification Disc Format (DVD-Audio or SACD) 2 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI *1 DVD-Audio and 2 channel compatible on HDMI *1 Left/Right or 2 ch downmix *3 Incompatible with DVD-Audio on HDMI *1 2 ch 2 ch VSX-AX4A Vi-s VSX-AX2A V -s PDP-506HDE/FDE PDP-436XDE/FDE PDP-505XDE/HDE 5.1 ch No sound *4 No sound *4 5.1 ch *2 Component/output Example Component SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI *1 2 ch VSX-AX4A S i-s VSX-AX2A S -s 5.1 ch *2 No sound Auto (DSD) SACD No sound No sound DSD 2ch/5.1 ch DV600AV_UK_EN.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 49 En English Speaker Distance (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default settings: all speakers 3.0 m You only need to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround sound from your system, you should set up the speaker distances from your listening position. 1 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. ⢠The L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2 Press î (cursor right) to change the speaker distance for the highlighted speaker. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settings of the front left ( L ) or front right ( R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances change relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L / R ) speaker distances can be set from 30 cm to 9 m in 30 cm incre- ments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from âÂÂ2.1 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ6.0 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press î (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and MPEG-audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ0.9 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud io Output Mode î 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 50 En Speaker Installation (DV-600AV only) ⢠Default settings: L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a speaker. ⢠The L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2 Press î (cursor right) to modify the selected speaker. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of your changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the main speaker cone in the speaker is 12cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have that speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the center and surround speakers are automatically set to Small and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4 Press î (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Aud i o Output Mode î 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings DV -600A V screen Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV -600A V screen DV600AV_UK_EN.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 51 En English Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp- tipped writing instrument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on discs as these can cause the disc to warp slightly during playback causing distortion in the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on discs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit before cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleaners. Never use thinners, benzine or insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit. If you use a chemical-impregnated cleaning cloth, read the instructions carefully before use. These cloths may leave smear marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry cloth. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. We do not recommend using commercially available lens cleaners for CD players. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 52 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on. Moving the player If you need to move the player, first press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playbackâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratios, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions, too, come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wide) or 16:9 (Compressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note that some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though you have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a standard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letter box format regardless of the setting. Note ⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compressed) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 53 En English Setting the TV system The default setting of this player is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you experience picture distor- tion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. Doing this, however, may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds of disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 If the player is on, press î STANDBY/ ON to switch it to standby. 2 Using the front panel controls, hold down î then press î STANDBY/ON to switch the TV system. The TV system changes as follows: ⢠AUTO î NTSC ⢠NTSC î PAL ⢠PAL î AUTO Note ⢠You have to switch the player into standby (press î STANDBY/ON ) before each change. Resetting the player Use this procedure to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the factory default. 1 Switch the player into standby. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the î (stop) button and press î STANDBY/ON to switch the player back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings are now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs carry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear panel. Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. In this case the attention sentence Incompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will play in any player. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Disc Player setting Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD/Super VCD/Video CD/ DivX Video/ WMV NTSC NTSC P AL NTSC PAL NTSC P AL PA L CD/MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG no disc â NTSC P AL NTSC or P AL 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 54 En Selecting languages using the language code list Some of the language options (such as âÂÂDVD Menu Lang.â in the Initial Settings) allow you to set your preferred language from any of the 136 languages listed in the language code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 61 for a complete list of languages and codes. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified after checking the items below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number Can't play discâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does not conform with the IEC standards might not play normally. DVD-Audio playback stops. ⢠The disc may have been illegally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press î , then start playback again ( î ). ⢠Press and hold the front panel î STANDBY/ON button for about 10 seconds to switch the unit off, then press again to switch back on. ⢠Switch the power off once, unplug from the wall socket, then plug back in and switch on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed while a disc is playing, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press î , then start playback again ( î ). DV600AV_UK_EN.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 55 En English Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for --OFF-- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesn't seem to work. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 18). ⢠The batteries are exhausted: Put in new ones (page 6). No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connections: Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. Also check the video cable for damage. ⢠TV/monitor or AV amplifier settings are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the connected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progressive but your TV/monitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 13 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 52 for how to set it correctly for your TV/monitor. Picture disturbance during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Due to the playerâÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. No audio, or audio is distorted. ⢠No audio is output during slow motion playback or when scanning discs other than audio CDs and SACDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the player's analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Check that all interconnects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminals are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessary. Also check the cable for damage. ⢠Make sure the player's output is not connected to the amplifier's phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/receiverâÂÂs settings (volume, input function, speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio signal. ⢠Make sure that the Digital Out setting is set to On (page 39). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/receiverâÂÂcheck the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver. ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the playerâÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunction. Problem Remedy DV600AV_UK_EN.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 45). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG Out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/receiverâÂÂcheck the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver. ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not output multichannel digital audio. Listen through the playerâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 50). ⢠Check the audio options available from the disc menu. Cannot listen to high- sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make sure that Linear PCM Out/96 kHz PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz (page 39). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. Cannot output 192kHz or 176.4kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digital audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot output 96kHz or 88.2kHz digital audio. ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out/96 kHz PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off/96 kHz (page 39). ⢠Some discs are digital copy protected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio output. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-DTS compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 39). If you do not do this, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected to a DTS-compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, check the amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mix does not sound right or sounds incomplete (for example, inaudible dialog). ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel if you've connected to the stereo inputs on your amplifier or TV (page 47). The audio recorded on a Super VCD disc is not output properly. ⢠If the audio is switched to [2] when playing a Super VCD that contains only one stereo soundtrack, there may be no sound at all. Press AUDIO to change the soundtrack. CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtual Surround. ⢠Virtual Surround does not work with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual Surround effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (2ch) analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel (page 45). ⢠The effectiveness of Virtual Surround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV600AV_UK_EN.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 57 En English HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio output. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 39.) ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Interface). Depending on the component you have connected, unreliable signal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the source component is only DVI/HDCP -compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connected using the HDMI inter face are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI video output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connected using the HDMI inter face are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Inter face). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16 if you want to reset the output resolution. No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HDMI Out setting is set to Auto , Auto (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (see HDMI Out on page 39 to do this). See also About the HDMI audio output settings on page 47 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1 ch) jack when connected via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 39.) Component Out cannot be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resolution is set to 720 x 480i (NTSC)/720 x 576i (PAL) . DV600AV_UK_EN.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 58 En USB troubleshooting Note ⢠Static electricity or other external influences may cause malfunctioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the power cord and then plug back in. This will usually reset the unit for proper operation. If this does not correct the problem, please consult your nearest Pioneer service center. A connected DVI component (with HDCP) doesnâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Deï¬Ânition Multimedia Inter face). Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage device is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32. ⢠USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in the Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the correct file extension: .mp3 for MP3 files; .wma for WMA files; .m4a for MPEG-4 AAC files; .jpg for JPEG files (upper or lower- case is OK). ⢠Make sure the file permission hasnâÂÂt been restricted (through a password, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG- 4 AAC files. ⢠The files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management) or FairPlay copy-protection. This is not a malfunction. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 59 En English Glossary Analog audio Direct representation of sound by an electrical signal. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3; widescreen models are 16:9. Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. Digital audio Indirect representation of sound using numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . DivX DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expresses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by FUJI FILM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-speed digital interface which has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi- channel surround-sound audio on a single digital connection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A standard file format used for still images. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂ. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are recognized by the extention âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some files purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iTunes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CD/ Super VCDs and some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD/ Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality, but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG encoded audio. See also Digital audio . DV600AV_UK_EN.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 60 En Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a video picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace which takes two passes to update the whole picture). Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate DVD-Video discs and players with particular areas of the world. See DVD-Video regions on page 53 for more information. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. See also Digital audio . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. WMV WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 61 En English Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118 , kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DV600AV_UK_EN.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 62 En Specifications General Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . 0.8 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 kg Dimensions DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) AV Connector (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R out 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level. . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA S-video output (DV-600AV only) Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Digital audio characteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 dB Total harmonic distortion DV-600AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0023 % DV-400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0065 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Optical digital output (DV-600AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical 1 357 9 1 1 1 3 1 51 7 1 92 1 24 68 1 0 1 2 14 16 18 20 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 63 En English Accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating instructions The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. DV600AV_UK_EN.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1471-A> Printed in Thailand <07C00001> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. http://www .pioneer .co.uk http://www .pioneer .eu PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 DV600AV_UK_EN.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ